Canon | IXUS 1100 HS | User guide | Canon IXUS 1100 HS User guide

Canon IXUS 1100 HS User guide
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ؛ ﻟﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LB/CB-2LBE‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫‪WS-DC10‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪.DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺗﻘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺭﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .PDF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Word/Word Viewer‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪) Word‬ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ؛ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺳﺑﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ‪ -‬ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻗﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﻳﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ] [ )ﺃﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ :(xx‬ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ”‪ “xx‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻ ﺑﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻝ؟‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۲٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۸۰‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪۹۳ ،٦۲ ،۲٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪٥۲ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ‪۷٦ ،٥٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻲ ‪٥٤ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ‪۷۲ .....................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻝ؟‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﻱ ‪۳۰ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ( ‪۱۱٦ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱۷۰ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۳٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۱۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۷ ،۳۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۰۳ ،۳۳ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳٥ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ‪۱۰٦ .......................................‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٤۰ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۳٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ‪٤۸ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪۱٥۹ ،۱۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۸۳ ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪۳ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪۳ ...............‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻝ؟‪٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪۹ .......................................‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۳ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ‪۱۷ ............‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۸ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۹ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۲۱ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۳ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۲٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪۲٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪۲٦ .................... (Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۳۰ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ‪۳۱ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۳۲ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪۳۳ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪۳٦ .............‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ‪٤۱ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ‪٤۲ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤۳ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪٤٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ – FUNC.‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪٤٥ .......‬‬
‫‪ - MENU‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪٤٦ ...............‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪٤۷ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪٤۸ ...............................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪٤۹ ............‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٥۰ ..................‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ ‪٥۱ ......................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥۲ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ‪٥۳ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪٥٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٥٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٥۷ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۸ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۸ ................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪٦۱ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪٦۲ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٦٥ ............................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۷۲ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪۷٤ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ‪۷۸ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‪۷۹ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪۸۰ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ ‪۸۱ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪۸۲ .............................AE‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪۸۳ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۸۳ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۸٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۸٦ ....................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۸۷ ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۸۸ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‪۸۹ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪۹۱ .................... (Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ )ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ( ‪۹۱ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪۹۳ .................................AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪۹٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪۹٦ ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۷ ......................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۹۷ .......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪۹۸ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۹ .......................... AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۹ .......................... FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‪۱۰۰ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۰۱ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪۱۰۲ ..........................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۰۳ .......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۰٤ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‪۱۰٥ ..‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪۱۰٦ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ‪۱۰۷ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۱۰۸ ................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۰۹ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰۹ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۱۲۲ .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۳ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱۲۳ ........‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲۷ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪۱۲۹ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ )ﻓﺋﺗﻲ(‪۱۳۱ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۳۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۳۳ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪۱۳٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۱۳٦ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪۱۳۷ ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۳۸ .......................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱۳۹ ................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٤۰ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٤۷ ................. (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۱ ..........................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱٥۳ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱٥٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۲ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱٦۸ ....................‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‪۱٦۹ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪۱۱۱ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۱۱۲ ....................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪۱۱٥ ............‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۱۱٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۱۱۸ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۱۹ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ‪۱۲۰ ....................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱۷۰ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪۱۷٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۱۷٥ ............................Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱۷۷ ......................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۸۰ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۸۳ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱۸۸ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۹٦ .................. FUNC.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪۱۹۷ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۱۹۸ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪۲۰۲ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ‪۲۰۳ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪۲۰٥ ................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺏ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻟﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ )ﻣﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺯﻋﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
۱۲
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻭﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺟﺳﺩﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﺑﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺃﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ؟‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪CB-2LB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ‪ :CB-2LB‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‬
‫ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ‪ :CB-2LBE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪ ،CHARGE‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪ FULL‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ٥۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LBE‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ*‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ*‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۱۷۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻳﺋﺔ )‪.Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ٍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ٍ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫”ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪“.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺃﻓﻌﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‪...‬‬
‫• ﺗﺯﺍﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ؟‬
‫ﻟﻘﺩ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲٤۰ - ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻟﻠﻣﺄﺧﺫ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ؛ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫*‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺗﺧﺩَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻟﺗﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﺿﻣﻥ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﱢﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳُﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﱢﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‬
‫( ﻭﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻗﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‬
‫( ﻭﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ؟‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ 1231‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ 5042‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ؟‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪.op‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۲۱‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۲۰۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬‬
‫• ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۲۱‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ n‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ‪n‬؟‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ .n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﺑﻘﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )ﺑﺩء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻓﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۷٥‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥٥‬ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ )ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗُﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ؟‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗُﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺿﻭﺿﺎ ًء‬
‫ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸٥ ،۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪) i‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ‪) .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺻﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺃﻓﻌﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‪...‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ؟‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۸٤‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺟﺭﱢ ﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) G‬ﺹ ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫• ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻭﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ؟‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ؟‬
‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺟﺭﱢ ﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪G‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۳٫۱‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ (j‬ﻭ‪ ۱٫۷ – ۱٫۰‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ،(j‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۱‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ h‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ؟‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ“ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۸٤‬ﻭ”ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪) “IS‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻛﺱ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ q‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻛﺱ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ r‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪،qr‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ q‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۳۰‬ﻓﺳﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪.r‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ r‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،a‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲۳‬‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۲٦‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺛﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.((۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 4‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱٤‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻳﻑ ﺃﻗﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ؟‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺳﻼﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩ ﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻣﺿﻣ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪(SP1‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista SP2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP SP3‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ً‬
‫ًَ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Pentium‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ﻭ‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٫٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺕ(‪ ۲ :‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ۳۲) Windows 7‬ﺑﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ٦٤) Windows Vista‬ﺑﺕ‪ ۳۲ ،‬ﺑﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ٥۱۲ :Windows XP‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‬
‫‪ ۷٦۸ × ۱،۰۲٤‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫)ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤۲۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ*‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫)‪Mac OS X (v10.5 – v10.6‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ً‬
‫ًَ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪) Intel‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ﻭ‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۲٫٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱ :Mac OS X v10.6‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٥۱۲ :Mac OS X v10.5‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ٤۸۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫‪ ۷٦۸ × ۱،۰۲٤‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ)‪ Mac OS X (v10.5‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩ )ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺹ ‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪،Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪ ،[Install‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ]‪/User Account Control‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Restart‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪[Finish‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪Images From Canon Camera using Canon‬‬
‫‪/CameraWindow‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ [Canon CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪،Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪/Start‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻳﻬﺎ ]‪[Canon Utilities‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﺛﻡ ]‪.[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪،Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Dock‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Downloads Images From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،[Canon CameraWindow‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺗﺧﺩَﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺗﺧﺩَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
٤۰
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۳ ،۷٦ ،۷٥ ،۷٤ ،٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪) i :‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ( ‪) j /‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥۳ ،۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) k :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ( ‪) g /‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ( )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۹ ،۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺹ ‪(۲٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) ON/OFF‬ﺹ ‪(۲۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۰ ،۸۳ ،٥۲‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۸‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) (LCD‬ﺹ ‪(۱۸٦ ،۱۸۳ ،٤۳‬‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۱۹‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۱ ،۳۰‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫‪ ١٧‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ™‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۷۱‬‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) A/V OUT‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۷۰ ،۱٤۰ ،۳۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺹ ‪ (٦۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ .l‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.۱۸۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ‬
‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ .(۳۱ ،۳۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻡ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦٤‬‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﱠ ﺿﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۸٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ؛ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (٤۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺿﻲء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺹ ‪/(۳۸‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ – FUNC.‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۹۱ – ۱۹۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.H‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺗﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺗﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .FUNC‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) \ :‬ﺹ ‪) c ،(۱۳۲‬ﺹ ‪) : ،(۱٤۷‬ﺹ ‪،(۱۲٥‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪،(۱۲۹‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪،(۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪) a‬ﺹ ‪،(۳۲‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪) ; ،(۱۲۲‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۱‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪ - MENU‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪ .(1‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹٥ – ۱۹۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٤۲‬ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ‪ qr‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ .(۳٥‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺣﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ؟‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫[ )ﺹ ‪ (۲۳‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥٦‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )ﺹ ‪ (۲۲‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥۹‬ﻭ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ[ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٦۱‬ﻭ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۷۱‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )ﺹ ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺹ ‪ (۷۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 4‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۳ ،٦۱‬‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (۲٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥۸‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ .A‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۳ – ۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ !‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ !‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ! ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ! ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٤۸‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪.i‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ i‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،4‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﺗﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۳٤٤ – ۲۸‬ﻣﻡ )‪ ۳۳٦ – ۲۸‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫• ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۸‬ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ )ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ؛ ﻓﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪) DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٤۰‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺿﻳﺋﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ )‪ ۳۰ – ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )‪ ۱۰ – ۱‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.$‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.$‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ $‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺿﻳﺋﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ )ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (HD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ؟‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 16:9‬ﺳﻳُﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗُﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﻣﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۳‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫)ﺩﻗﻳﻕ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ Pixels‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪12M/4000×3000‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪(۱‬‬
‫‪6M/2816x2112‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪(۲‬‬
‫‪2M/1600x1200‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪۳۰۸٤‬‬
‫‪1231‬‬
‫‪5042‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷٤‬‬
‫‪2514‬‬
‫‪10295‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲۰‬‬
‫‪2320‬‬
‫‪9503‬‬
‫‪۷۸۰‬‬
‫‪4641‬‬
‫‪19007‬‬
‫‪٥٥۸‬‬
‫‪6352‬‬
‫‪26010‬‬
‫‪۲۷۸‬‬
‫‪12069‬‬
‫‪49420‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫‪20116‬‬
‫‪82367‬‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫‪30174‬‬
‫‪123550‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ً‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .4:3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٥۷‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ 4:3‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪16:9‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ 1920 × 1080‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫‪ ٥۹٤ × ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺭﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪– ٤۲۰ × ۲۹۷) A3 – A5‬‬
‫‪ ۲۱۰ × ۱٤۸‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
٦۰
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻳﻘﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ V‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ )ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻳﻔﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۱‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۳‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪) A‬ﺹ ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ )ﺷﺎﻁﺊ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﻁﺊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻌﻛﺱ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ O‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ )ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﱡ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،t‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱٦٥‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫)‪ 1984 × 1488‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺯﺍﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪ (۸٦‬ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ؛ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻣﻳﻕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.T‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.T‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﱠ ﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.Y‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.Y‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ؟‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﻣﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪.A‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺣﻣﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥۸‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥٤‬‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ -‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،٦۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﺑﺗﺳﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺗﺳﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﺑﺗﺳﺎﻣﺔ‪ON/OFF :‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(۷٦ ،۷٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ؟‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻧﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺗﺢ ﻓﻣﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ًَ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،٦۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﺑﻌﻳﻧﻪ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ؟‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺩﺍء ﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ ﻛﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻏﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ ﺟﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ )ﺹ ‪ .(۹۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺛﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،٦۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺿﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ ﺟﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺿﻳﺋﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺿﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.N‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.N‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ )‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻌﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦٥‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ‪.H‬‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ‪ ۷٫۸‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)‪ 1984 x 1488‬ﺑﮑﺳﻝ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۷‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۰‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪،(۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۳۸ – ۱۳۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪،(۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥۱‬ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۱‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ٥‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 1984 x 1488‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ G‬ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.G‬‬
‫• ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.AE‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪،G‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۳ – ۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ،(j‬ﻭ‪ ۱‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ –‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺿﻙ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۲ – ۸۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ؟‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﱢ ﺏ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺹ ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪.#‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ‪.H‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۳٫۱‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ۱٫۷ – ۱٫۰‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.h‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ h‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪.(۳‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻭﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ )ﺫﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪.(۳‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪.(۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۸٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺿﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﺻﺣﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ @ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪.Drive‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ W‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ W‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫‪۳٫۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪۰٫۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪*LV‬‬
‫‪۰٫۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،t‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) t‬ﺹ ‪ (٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۹۷‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦ ،٥٥‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺯﺍﻩٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺛﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۹۰‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۸۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪/‬ﺃﻏﻣﻕ‬
‫)ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺗﺢ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،e‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥۰ – ۱‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪.(j‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،e‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ e‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ؟‬
‫ﺟﺭﱢ ﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ [ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ‪ e‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ )ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،u‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪u‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻭﺛﻭﻗﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ )‪ ۳‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.u‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،u‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ u‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱٫٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲٫۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻣﻔﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [1.5x‬ﻭ]‪ [2.0x‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤۲٫۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥۰٤‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥٦٫۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦۷۲‬ﻣﻡ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ )ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۸‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪) AF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،[AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۹۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺯء ﻣﺧﻔﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻻﻁﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻐﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۹۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،[AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۹۳‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۹٤‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ؟‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭً ﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۹۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ً‬
‫ﻫﺩﻓﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻬً ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺻﻔﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ؟‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(۲۷‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﺭ ﺣﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪ e‬ﺃﻭ ‪) u‬ﺹ ‪ (۹۱‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ %‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ‪.%‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪..‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ 4‬ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫)ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (AE‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ &‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻭﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ &‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻭﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ (‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻁﻌًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.Z‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﻕ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻳﻧﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻳﻐﻠﻕ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻵﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.$‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ W‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻟـﻘﺳﻣﻲ ”ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ“ ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ ،۱‬ﻭﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.4‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺛﻠﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦۲‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺷﺎﻁﺊ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦۹‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺛﻠﺞ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ*‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪.۱*iFrame‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ pixels‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.Apple‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻭﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺃﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺫﻳﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ؛ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 240‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ 120‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۳٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪ 320 × 240‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ pixel‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻟﻳﺱ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ،Pixels‬ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫‪ 1920 x 1080‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.Full HD‬‬
‫‪ 1280 x 720‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 640 x 480‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ۱٤‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪.(HD‬‬
‫‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪.(SD‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٤۳‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ‪ ۲٤‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٥٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۳‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳۸‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬
‫• ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥٥‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(“ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۸۳‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (۹۹‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( )ﺹ ‪(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪) (Macro‬ﺹ ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ )ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ( )ﺹ ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(۱٦٥‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ )ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ( )ﺹ ‪(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ )ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺣﺫﻑ ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺳﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺟﺯءً ﺍ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۲۰۳‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻁﺭﻗﺎ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۳۸ – ۱۳۳‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪.g‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪.k‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻔﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ k‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻔﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻑ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ .n‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۷۲‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.s‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.s‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺗﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‬
‫;‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﺋﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ“‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۱۱۲‬ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۱٦‬ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪ .(۱۱۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪) “(DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٥۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۳۳‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪..‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪..‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪[...‬‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۱٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﺭﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (۳۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۰‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲۳‬‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ l‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪ k‬ﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﻠﻁﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪(۳۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ ،k‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ ،g‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۷۹‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪H‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۱۲‬ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(۱۱۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪) “(DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٥۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺣﺗﻣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ )ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺳﺣﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺳﺣﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲۷ ،۳۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.:‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٥٥ ،۲٤‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱۲٥‬ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎء‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ^‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،۳‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱۲٥‬ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،۱۲۷‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎء‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ^‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،۱۲۷‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻁ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎء‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ^‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺟﻭﻡ )‬
‫( )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ )ﻓﺋﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )ﺹ ‪” ،(۱۱٦‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪” ،(۱۲٥‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪،(۱۲۷‬‬
‫”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪) “(DPOF‬ﺹ ‪” ،(۱٤۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪.V‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.O‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.t‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻭ]ﻓﺋﺗﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ;‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ;‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ^‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺋﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ \‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ \‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ ،n‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ 1‬ﻭ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٦۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ^‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺟﱠ ﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﱠ ﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٥۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﺫﺑﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺹ ‪.۸۹‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻛﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۱۳۳‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ؟‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۱۳۳‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫• ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP series‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩ )ﺹ ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪.c‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.c‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.۲۰٤‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۰‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻻﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۱‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﻹﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 4:3‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۳‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۰‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺯ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪.(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) c‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.c‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،2‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺍﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪) 3‬ﺹ ‪.(۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،2‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟـ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻧُﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧُﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۹‬ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٤۹‬ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪،(۱٥۰ – ۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[ ﻟﻁﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻧﻘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎء‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ g‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٥۱‬ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٥۱‬ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺿﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪) 3‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻧﻌﻛﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻓﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۲٤‬؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻼ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣُﺳﺟﻠَﺔ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ -‬ﻣﻥ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،9999‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﻊ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۲،۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻋً ﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪.9999‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪ 0001‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻭ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ،0001‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪ .(۳۰‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﺇﻁﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥۰‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎء ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۸۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(۲۲‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،G‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪) 4‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪ ،G‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۳ – ۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪ ،[AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ؛ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۲۷‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۹۷‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۹۹‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) FE‬ﺹ ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪ e‬ﺃﻭ ‪) u‬ﺹ ‪ (۹۱‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۷۹‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) W‬ﺹ ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ ،[AF-‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻟﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪،[.‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺯﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪10 – 2‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪،AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺳﻡ ”ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ“‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻁﻭﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ*‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻝ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ )ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺿﻌﻬﺎ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺭﻣ ًﺯﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱٦٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،۱٦٦‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪.۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.4‬‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۱۹ ،۳۱‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﻠﻁﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۳۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۲‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ( ﻭﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ )ﺹ ‪.(۳۱ ،۳۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )ﺹ ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪.k‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪) AVC-DC400ST‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(۲۰٤‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ( ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۲۰٤‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI HTC-100‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱۷۰‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ )ﺹ ‪(۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI HTC-100‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪.(HD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.[HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱۷۱‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ qr‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ OK/Select‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ OK/Select‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ qr‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﻳﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDMI CEC‬‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻕ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) ACK-DC70 AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱۸‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ۱۸‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣُﺻﻧﱢﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۷٦‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﺣﻅﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺛﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(٥۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،3‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪.[Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ،H‬ﺛﻡ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪،3‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ‪ ،[Eye-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Eye-Fi‬؟‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،ON/OFF‬ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹ ،۱۸‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻗﻁﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ً‬
‫ﻣﺛﻼ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹ ،۱۸‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۲۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪h‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦٥‬‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻁﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ )‪ ،macro‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪.(۹۷ ،۹٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻅﻠﻡ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۷ ،۸۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۹۹ ،۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! )ﺹ ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۹۹ ،۹۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! )ﺹ ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء )ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )ﺹ ‪ .(۱٦۳‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤۲‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ “FUNC.‬ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۳ – ۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۳٤ ،۲٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﱢ ﺏ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥٥‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻙ‬
‫• ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺣﺭﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .1‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ .j‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺟﺭﱢ ﺏ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”‪ .“LOCK‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥٥‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۰۳ ،۸۱ ،٦۱ ،٥۱ ،۳۳ ،۲٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(۱۳۸ – ۱۳۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۷ ،۳۲‬ﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ AF/‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫• ﻳﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸۰‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(۱۸‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )ﺹ ‪(۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪RAW/AVI‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ!‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۳۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۳۸ – ۱۳۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٥۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۳۸ – ۱۳۳‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ .(۱٥۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥۱‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ‪ ٥۰۱‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۲۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺋﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥۱‬‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ؛ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )‪ ۱۰۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ؛ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )ﺹ ‪ (۱٥۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺳﻛﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪١٣ ١٤ ١٥‬‬
‫‪١٠ ١١ ١٢‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۸۸‬ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺹ ‪(۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ*‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(۸۹‬‬
‫‪) Drive Mode‬ﺹ ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( )ﺹ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪/ (٥۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪) Pixels‬ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸ ،٥۸‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺹ ‪(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٣٠ ٣١ ٣٢‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(۹۸‬‬
‫‪ ١٧‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﺹ ‪،(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹۷‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ / (٥۳‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۹۲‬‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪(۳۳‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳ ،٥۲‬‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۱‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۲ ،۲۷‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫‪) DISP. ٢٤‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( )ﺹ ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦٤‬‬
‫‪ ٢٦‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥٦ ،٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪،(۹۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) FE‬ﺹ ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫‪٢٥ ٢٦ ٢٧‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۹۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۸۷‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﱠ ﻬﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﱢ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ً‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،A‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻅﻼﻝ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺿﻭء ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫* ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻣﻌﺗﻣًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪*.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪.(Hybrid IS) macro‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺭﺃﺳً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٦٥‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫‪۱۰ ۱۱ ۱۲‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫‪۲۸ ۲۹‬‬
‫‪۲٤ ۲٥ ۲٦ ۲۷‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۹۸‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ – ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۳٥‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۷۹‬ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۸٦‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫)ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪) Pixels‬ﺹ ‪ ١٧ ،(۱۰۸ ،٥۸‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) MOV‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫‪) FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( )ﺹ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱٤۷‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﺹ ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳۷ ،۸۷‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦‬‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸ ،٥۹‬‬
‫‪) DISP.‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( )ﺹ ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۲۰‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳۸ – ۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(۱۳٦ ،۸۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )ﺹ ‪(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ )ﺹ ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ op‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،۰‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* )ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* )ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (۳۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫!‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪/AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) ٤*FE‬ﺹ ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹۷‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۹٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ !‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳ ،٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪TY‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫— ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۹۸‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫] [ ‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ*‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪ue‬‬
‫— ‪W‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥٦ ،٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﺹ ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫‪) Drive Mode‬ﺹ ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪) Pixels‬ﺹ ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺹ ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۸ ،۱۰٦‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ‪.t‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪TY‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫*‪ ٦‬ﻳﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫*‪ ۷‬ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ*‪۱‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫— ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫— ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫— ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪) ۲*AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫—‬
‫)‪(1.5x/2.0x‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ 10 – 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥۳‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(۹٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۹۷‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۲‬‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٦۳ ،۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۸۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )ﺹ ‪(۱٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫*‪] ۳‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.A‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪TY‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ*‪/‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‪/‬ﻛﺎﻛﻲ‪/‬ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥٥ ،۲٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ*‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺭﻱ*‪/‬ﻳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ*‪ ۰/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪،۱٥۸ ،٥۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ 10 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 20‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ *1/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ*‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫‪NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ*‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫* ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫‪۱۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫* ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ*‪/‬ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺕ*‪/‬ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺳﺣﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫‪۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‬
‫‪۱۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ )ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﱢﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺳﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ۱۲٫۱.................‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪) 5.0.......................................‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( ‪) 60.0 -‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ﻣﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪) ۲۸ :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( ‪) ۳۳٦ -‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪ ۱۲.....................‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ۱........................................‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪ ۱ ،‬ﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫• ‪ ٥۰ – ۱ Macro‬ﺳﻡ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪...............................‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪DIGIC 4 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪.................................................‬ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﻧﻭﻉ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۸٫۰................................................‬ﺳﻡ )‪ ۳٫۱‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ..............................‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ‪ ٤٦۱،۰۰۰‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪16:9.........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ‪..............................................‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪..........................................‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺭﺩ )ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ AF ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪...........................................AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .........................................‬ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ‪ ۲± ...............‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﺳﻧﺔ(‪ ................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ISO 100/200/400/800/1600/3200 ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪(P‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ ......................................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‪،Fluorescent ،Tungsten ،‬‬
‫‪ ،Fluorescent H‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1/4000 – ۱ .....................................‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1/4000 – ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪ ۲.................................................‬ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ‪) f/3.4 – f/6.3................................‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) f/5.9 – f/10.0 ،‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‪...............................................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ ۳۰...............................................‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۳٫۱‬ﻡ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪ ۱٫۷ – ۱٫۰ ،‬ﻡ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫‪۱۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ......................................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‪ ،P ،۱‬ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻁﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ*‪ ،۲‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻣﻧﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻁﺊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻠﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪ ،iFrame‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﺗﺑﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ ............................‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ٤٫۰ :‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫)ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٤۸‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺁﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪..........................................‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۳٫۳..............................................‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪(P‬‬
‫‪ ۷٫۸‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪ ............................... (CIPA‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ .....................................‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪ Design rule for Camera File system ..........................................‬ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(۱٫۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪Exif 2.3 (JPEG).......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV................................................‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪) Linear PCM :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ((‬
‫‪۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪16:9.......................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،4000 × 2248 :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪ ،2816 × 1584 :۱‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪:۲‬‬
‫‪ ،1920 × 1080‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪640 × 360 :‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،4000 × 2664 :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪ ،2816 × 1880 :۱‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪:۲‬‬
‫‪ ،1600 × 1064‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪640 × 424 :‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،4000 × 3000 :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪ ،2816 × 2112 :۱‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪:۲‬‬
‫‪ ،1600 × 1200‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪640 × 480 :‬‬
‫‪1:1‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،2992 × 2992 :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪ ،2112 × 2112 :۱‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪:۲‬‬
‫‪ ،1200 × 1200‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪480 × 480 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪................................................‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪:iFrame‬‬
‫‪ 30) 1280 × 720‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 120) 640 × 480‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪ ۲‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ 30 ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪۱‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ 240) 320 × 240 ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪ ۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪٤*640 × 480 ،٤*1280 × 720‬‬
‫ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 24) 1920 × 1080‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪ 30) 1280 × 720 ،(٥‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪ 30) 640 × 480 ،(۱‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ* (‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۲۹٫۹۷‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۱۱۹٫۸۸‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۲۳۹٫۷٦‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ٦ :‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۳/‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۱٫٥/‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ۳۰ :‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۲۳٫۹۷٦‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪Hi-Speed USB ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ‪PictBridge ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .......................................‬ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ‪) CA-DC10‬ﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC ACK-‬‬
‫‪(DC70‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ۲۱٫۹ × ٥۸٫۹ × ۹۹٫۰ ..................... (CIPA‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ ۲۰٦ ......................(CIPA‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻣﺗﺿﻣ ًﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ ۱۸۳‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫‪۲۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ ......................................................‬ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‪ ۳٫٥ ...................................‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ ‪ ۸۷۰ ............................................‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ۳۰۰ ............................................‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ٤۰ – ۰ ....................................‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ۱٥٫۳ × ٤۳٫۱ × ۱٤٫٦ .....................................................‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪ ۲۱ .....................................................‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LB/CB-2LBE‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ‪ ۱۰۰ ..............................................‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ – ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ ۸٫٥‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( – ‪ ۱۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫‪ ۰٫۰۸٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( – ‪ ۰٫۰٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ ‪ ٤.۲ ............................................‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ۰٫۷ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪ ................................................‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪ .............................................‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﻛﺗﻣﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫)ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺅﺷﺭﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ٤۰ – ۰ ....................................‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ۲٤٫٥ × ۸۲٫۰ × ٥۹٫۰ .....................................................‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪ ۷۳ :CB-2LB .....................................................‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٦۷ :CB-2LBE‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫• ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﺭﺗﻬﺎ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺷﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ NB-9L‬ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ*‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*CB-2LB/CB-2LBE‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ ‪WS-DC10‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫* ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows/‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )‪ (AV‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫‪۲۰۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LB/CB-2LBE‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ACK-DC70 AC‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲٤۰ - ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻟﻠﻣﺄﺧﺫ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ؛ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳًﺎ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﻌُﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.High-Power Flash HF-DC1‬‬
‫‪۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪SELPHY‬‬
‫‪Series‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪۹٦ ،۲۸ ................................................‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷ ....................................................... DPOF‬‬
‫‪۸۸ .................................................Drive Mode‬‬
‫‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪٤٦ ................................‬‬
‫‪۱۸٥ ...................................................hybrid IS‬‬
‫‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‪۱٦٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۲ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪۲۰٤ ،۱٤۰ .........................................PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱۲٤ ،۱۲۳ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱۷۷ ................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪۹٤ ...................................(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۹۳ ،۲۷ ...............................................AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻳﻔﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦۳ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۱ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪٤۹ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪٤۸ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪۱٦۲ ،۲۷ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۸ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰۹ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪/Pixels‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪۱۰۸ ....‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۰۸ ،۳٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪۳٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۹ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪۱۳٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱٦٥ ،٥۲ ،۲۹ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪۲ ...DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪۳۷ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۲ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ‪۳٦ ................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪۸۲ ......................................................AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۱٥۹ ،۱٥۸ ،٥۰ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۷ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪٥۹ ،۲۰ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪۱٥٥ ،۲٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۳٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۱۷٥ ............................................... Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXCg‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۹۷ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۸ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱۰٥ ،٦۷ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۱۳۷ ،۸۷ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۱ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۷٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۰ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۳۷ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪۱۳٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۳۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ )ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪۱۳۳ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱۳٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪۱٦٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۳۲ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪۱٥۷ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۰ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۹۳ ،۲۷ ........................................AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۷ ...................................................AF‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪۹٥ .......................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۹۷ ...............................................‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۹٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪) Pixels‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٥۸ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱۲۲ ........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۳۸ ،۱۰۱ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۰ ...................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۹ ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۸۸ ...............................................‬‬
‫‪۲۰٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪٥۹ ،۲۰ ،۱٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۸۳ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۰۸ ،۳٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ )ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪۱۳۳ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪۹۳ .................................(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪۱۰۲ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪٥۳ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪٥۳ ،۲٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۱۲۹ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱۳٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ )ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ( ‪۱٥٥ ،۲٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪۸٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۸٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۱٥۹ ،۱٥۸ ،٥۰ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪۱٥۹ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪۱٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪۹٥ ................................................. AF‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ‪۱٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۱۸۳ ،۸٦ .............................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪۲۰۳ ،۱٥۹ ،۱۷ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۲۰۳ ،۲ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۳ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۸٦ ،۱۸۳ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ، FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪٤۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻁﺊ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦۳ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦۹ ............................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۷۹ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱٦۳ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۷ ،۳۲ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۱۲٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۱۰٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۱۲٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪۱۸۳ ،۱٦٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۸ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۹ ...................................................AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪۸۳ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۹ ...................................................FE‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ‪٤۲ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪۱٤ ،۱۳ ،۲ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۱۸۰ ..................................................‬‬
‫‪۲۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪۱۷٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪۲۰۳ ،۱۷٤ ...................................... AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٤۰ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪۹۸ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۲ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱۷۰ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ‪۱٦۸ ،۳۱ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ‪۱۲۳ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۱۱٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ‪۱۱۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭ‪۱۱۹ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪۱۱٥ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱۷۰ .............................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱۱۲ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۱۱۹ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ‪۱۱۳ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪۳۰ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۱۱٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۲۲ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ‪۲ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪٥۲ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۸۳ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء‪۱۰۰ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ ‪۱۳۱ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱۰٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪٤٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۹٦ ،۱۸۸ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪۲ ......... DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۹ ......................................................... AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱۸۳ ،۹۷ ..................................................AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۹۹ ..........................................................FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۹٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪٤۹ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪۱٤۰ ،۳۸ ،۲ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪۱٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪۹۲ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۱۱۸ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ‪۱۰۷ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲۷ ،۳۲ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٦۳ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪۱٦۳ ،٤۲ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪۱٦۱ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۲۰۳ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۷۲ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۸٥ ،۱٦٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪٤٤ ،٤۲ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٥٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪٥٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۷٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪٥٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۷٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٥۷ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪۹۱ ...................................................‬‬
‫‪۹۱ .................................................. Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) AUTO‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۲٦ ................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۹۱ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪۱۷٤ ،۱۷۱ ،۱۷۰ ،۱٤۰ ،۳۸ ...................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪٥٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۲۲ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪۲۱ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪۱٥۹ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪۹۱ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪۸۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۳ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۸۹ .........................‬‬
‫‪۲۰۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
ً ‫ ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ‬.‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
.‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
.SD-3C, LLC. ‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬SDXC ‫ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
.‫ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‬Microsoft ‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬exFAT ‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬High-Definition Multimedia Interface‫ ﻭ‬HDMI ‫ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬HDMI ‫ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
.HDMI Licensing LLC. ‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
.Apple Inc. ‫ ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬iFrame ‫ ﻭﺭﻣﺯ‬iFrame ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
•
•
•
•
MPEG-4 ‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ‬
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
noncommercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T
patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
.‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
۲۰۸
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪CEL-SS1SA2N0‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2011‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising